گرامر برای مکالمه زبان انگلیسی1

‫ﮔﺮاﻣﺮ ﺑﺮای ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ زﺑﺎن‬ ‫اﻧﮕﻠﯿﺴﯽ‬

‫‪WwW.MihanDownload.CoM‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺯﻜﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻡ ﻨﺸﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻡ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﺆﻟﻒ‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭼﻪ ﮐﺴﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬

‫‪10‬‬

‫‪ .3‬ﻣﻌﺮﻓﯽ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ‬

‫‪11‬‬

‫‪ .4‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ )ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺍﻣ ِﺮ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﯼ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ(‬

‫‪12‬‬

‫• ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫• ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ‬ ‫• ﻓﻌﻞ‬ ‫• ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫• ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫• ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫• ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ‬ ‫• ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ‬ ‫• ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫• ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ )ﻣﻌﻴﻦ(‬ ‫• ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪The‬‬ ‫• ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬ ‫• ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ‪ must‬ﻭ ‪have to‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ )ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ(‬

‫‪23‬‬

‫‪ .6‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ‬

‫‪26‬‬

‫‪ .7‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫‪30‬‬

‫‪ .8‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫‪33‬‬

‫‪To Do .9‬‬

‫‪36‬‬

‫‪ .10‬ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ‬

‫‪38‬‬

‫‪ .11‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪:‬‬

‫‪Simple future tense‬‬

‫‪42‬‬

‫‪ .12‬ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬

‫‪44‬‬

‫‪ .13‬ﺩﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪tell & say‬‬

‫‪47‬‬

‫‪ .14‬ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫‪48‬‬

‫‪ .15‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬

‫‪50‬‬

‫‪ .16‬ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ‬

‫‪53‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫‪ .17‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﺖ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫‪54‬‬

‫‪ .18‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ »ﺍﺯ« ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‬

‫‪55‬‬

‫‪ » .19‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ « ‪Future Continuous Tense‬‬

‫‪58‬‬

‫‪ .20‬ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪Sequence of tenses :‬‬

‫‪61‬‬

‫‪«Used to » .21‬‬ ‫‪ » .22‬ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ « ‪Question tag‬‬

‫‪62‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬ ‫‪Avoid Repatition‬‬

‫‪ .23‬ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫‪The additions‬‬

‫‪ .24‬ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬ ‫‪Æ‬‬

‫‪ .25‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ .26‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ .27‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫‪CAN‬‬

‫‪69‬‬ ‫‪71‬‬ ‫‪73‬‬

‫‪MUST Æ‬‬

‫‪73‬‬

‫‪WANT‬‬

‫‪74‬‬

‫‪Æ‬‬

‫‪Some &any .28‬‬

‫‪76‬‬

‫‪ .29‬ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬

‫‪78‬‬

‫‪ .30‬ﺩﻭ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻲ ﻫﺎ‬

‫‪82‬‬

‫‪ .31‬ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪84‬‬

‫‪possesive forms‬‬

‫‪ .32‬ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ‪Putting two sentences together :‬‬

‫‪85‬‬

‫‪ .33‬ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ‬

‫‪86‬‬

‫‪ Reflexive pronouns (self ) .34‬ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﻲ‬

‫‪87‬‬

‫‪Here & There .35‬‬ ‫» ‪« it‬‬ ‫‪ .36‬ﺑﺤﺚ‬

‫‪89‬‬ ‫‪92‬‬

‫‪ .37‬ﺻﺮﻑ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺭ ‪ 16‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫‪94‬‬

‫‪ » .38‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ «‬

‫‪95‬‬

‫‪ .39‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ) ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻲ ( ‪:‬‬

‫‪100‬‬

‫‪ » .40‬ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ « ) ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ (‬

‫‪106‬‬

‫‪ .41‬ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫‪108‬‬

‫‪ .42‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫‪109‬‬

‫‪ .43‬ﺻﻔﺖ ‪adjective‬‬

‫‪111‬‬

‫‪The same as .44‬‬ ‫‪ .45‬ﻗﻴﺪ ‪adverb‬‬

‫‪115‬‬ ‫‪118‬‬

‫‪ .46‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪intensifiers (very, too, enough) :‬‬

‫‪123‬‬

‫‪Such .47‬‬ ‫‪ .48‬ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ too‬و ‪enough‬‬

‫‪127‬‬ ‫‪129‬‬

‫‪» .49‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ« »‪«Other‬‬

‫‪130‬‬

‫‪ .50‬ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ‪Relative Pronouns‬‬

‫‪136‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪ .51‬ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ‬

‫‪141‬‬

‫‪ .52‬ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫‪145‬‬ ‫‪Conditionals‬‬

‫‪ .53‬ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ‬ ‫‪ » Otherwise .54‬ﻭﺍﻻ«‬ ‫‪« Wish » .55‬‬

‫‪146‬‬ ‫‪149‬‬ ‫‪150‬‬

‫ﻛﺎﺷﻜﻲ ـ ﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺵ‬

‫‪ .56‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ‪if‬‬

‫‪151‬‬

‫‪ .57‬ﻭﻗﺘﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ» ‪« It is time‬‬

‫‪151‬‬

‫‪ .58‬ﺣﺬﻑ‬

‫‪152‬‬

‫‪IF‬‬

‫‪Unless .59‬‬ ‫‪Would rather .60‬‬ ‫‪as if – as though .61‬‬ ‫» ‪« in Case‬‬ ‫‪) .62‬ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺍ ﻧﻜﻨﻪ(‬

‫‪153‬‬ ‫‪154‬‬ ‫‪156‬‬ ‫‪157‬‬

‫‪Both .63‬‬ ‫‪ .64‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ‪active & passive voice :‬‬

‫‪158‬‬ ‫‪159‬‬

‫• ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ‬ ‫• ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ‬ ‫• ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬ ‫• ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬ ‫• ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬ ‫• ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬ ‫• ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬ ‫• ﺟﺎﻱ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ‬ ‫‪ .65‬ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫‪170‬‬

‫‪ .66‬ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ‬

‫‪171‬‬

‫‪ .67‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ‪reported speach‬‬

‫‪172‬‬

‫‪ .68‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪Indirect speech‬‬

‫‪173‬‬

‫• ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﺧﺒـﺮﻱ‬ ‫• ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫• ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .69‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ) ‪( gerund‬‬

‫‪181‬‬

‫‪ .70‬ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪to‬‬

‫‪184‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

7

‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺗﮑﻨﻮﻟﻮﮊﯼ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﯼ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﮑﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻧﺸﺠﻮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻘﻘﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺍﻣﺮﯼ ﺑﺪﻳﻬﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻗﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺁﺏ ﺩﺭﻳﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﮐﺸﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﻘـﺪﺭ ﺗﺸﻨﮕﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﮔﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺷﺒﺨﺘﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎﯼ ﺑﻴﺸﻤﺎﺭﯼ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻣﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺫﮐﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺒﺘﺪﯼ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩﯼ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺒﻼ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﮔﺮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺟﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﺰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺟﺰﻭﺍﺕ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﯼ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺒﺘﺪﯼ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﻮﻳﺘﺮ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮﯼ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﮑﻠﯽ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﯼ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﺭﻭﺳﯽ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻗﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭﯼ ﺑﻠﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﻧﺪﯼ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﯼ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﻟﻴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﯼ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻮﻟﻒ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﺎﺗﯽ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﮐﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭﺍﺗﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﺑﺨﻮﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﻟﻒ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻧﻈﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﺭﺯﺷﻤﻨﺪﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻭﯼ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺪﺭ ﻋﺰﻳﺰﻡ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻼﺵ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻬﺎﺩﻥ ﺳﻨﮓ ﺑﻨﺎﯼ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﺰﻳﺰﻡ ﺑﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻧﮕﻴﺰﻩ ﻭ ﺷﻮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﮑﺮ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺴﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﻘﺪﺭﻡ ﮐﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻤﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﮐﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﮑﺮ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺩﺍﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﻘﺪﺭﻡ ﺁﻗﺎﯼ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻧﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﻨﺎﺋﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﯼ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺲ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺮ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻟﻒ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﯽ ﻋﻤﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺯﺣﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻏﺮﺍﻕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﻭﻃﻠﺒﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻭﯼ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻣﻘﺪﻭﺭ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺩ ﺍﺭﺟﻤﻨﺪﻡ ﺟﻨﺎﺏ ﺁﻗﺎﯼ ﺭﺿﺎ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺎﺗﻴﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎﯼ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﻋﺸﻖ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﺸﮑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﺎﻝ ﺧﺮﺳﻨﺪﯼ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﮎ ﻫﺪﻳﻪ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﯽ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻡ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﻳﺖ ﭘﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺎﺭ ‪1383‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﻲ ﺭﺍﻳﮕﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻣﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮ ﻭ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻌﺖ ﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﻤﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻴﻨﮏ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﻲ ‪[email protected]‬‬ ‫ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪http://www-ce.uta.edu/~enayatpour/hmpg/mynotes.htm‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭼﻪ ﮐﺴﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻬﺎﯼ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﺑﻴﺮﺳﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻭﻃﻠﺒﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﮑﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮﯼ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻭﻃﻠﺒﻴﻨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ‪,MCHE ،TOEFL‬‬ ‫‪,IELTS‬ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩﯼ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺼﺪ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪10‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﯽ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ‪:‬‬

‫ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﮐﻤﯽ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﺮ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩﯼ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺼﺪ ﻳﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﮐﻤﯽ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﺮ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩﯼ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺼﺪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ‬

‫ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻸ ﺩﺍﻭﻃﻠﺒﻴﻨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻸ ﺩﺍﻭﻃﻠﺒﻴﻨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ‪ IELTS ،TOEFL‬ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬

‫‪ IELTS ،TOEFL‬ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺎﺩ‬

‫ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺎﺩ ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﻭﻃﻠﺒﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﮑﻮﺭ‬

‫ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﻭﻃﻠﺒﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﮑﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮﯼ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬

‫ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮﯼ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ‬

‫ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ :‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺩﺭﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻔﺎﻫﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺷﮏ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﯽ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﯼ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﯼ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪11‬‬

‫ﺑﻨﺎﻡ ﺧﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‪ :‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ +‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ‪ +‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ‪ +‬ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‪ :‬ﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺁﻣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺁﻣﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‬

‫ﺟﻤﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ‬

‫→ ‪we‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎ → ‪you‬‬

‫→‪I‬‬

‫ﺗﻮ → ‪you‬‬

‫ﺍﻭ‬

‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ → ‪they‬‬

‫→ ‪he‬‬

‫ﺍﻭ → ‪she‬‬

‫ﺁﻥ → ‪it‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻓﻌﻞ‪ :‬ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ )ﻥ( ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﺑـﻪ ﮐـﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎ )ﻥ( ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‪ ,‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ‪ to‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ⇒ to‬ﻥ → ﻣﺼﺪﺭ → ﻓﻌﻞ‬ ‫‪see‬‬

‫‪to see ⇒ I‬‬

‫‪You see‬‬ ‫‪They see‬‬

‫‪12‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ‪at home‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ‪in the class‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ‪ here‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ ‪at school‬‬

‫ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ‪there‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ‪every other day‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺩ ‪on odd days‬‬

‫ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ‪yesterday‬‬

‫ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ‪every day‬‬

‫ﺍﻣــﺮﻭﺯ ‪today‬‬

‫ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻭﺝ ‪on even days‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣـﻲ ﺭﺳـﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑـﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬ـ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪2‬ـ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪3‬ـ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺘﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺠﺰ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﯼ ‪ this‬ﻭ ‪ that‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤـﻊ ﻳـﺎ ﻣﻔـﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪PL‬‬ ‫→‪this book ‬‬ ‫‪these books‬‬

‫‪this → these‬‬

‫‪PL‬‬ ‫→‪that car ‬‬ ‫‪those cars‬‬

‫‪that → those‬‬

‫ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫ﺣﺴﻦ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪ‪Hassan saw Ali .‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﻦ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪ‪Hassan saw him .‬‬

‫‪13‬‬

‫ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‬

‫ﺟﻤﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ـ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ـ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ‬

‫‪us‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ـ ﻣﺮﺍ‬

‫‪me‬‬

‫‪You‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮـ ﺗﻮ ﺭﺍ‬

‫‪you‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ـ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ‬

‫‪him‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭـ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ )ﺯﻥ(‬

‫‪her‬‬

‫‪them‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ـ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ‬

‫‪it‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‬

‫ﺟﻤﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ‬

‫‪our‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﻮ‬

‫‪your‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬

‫‪their‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﻮ‬

‫‪my‬‬ ‫‪your‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻭ‬

‫‪his‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻭ‬

‫‪her‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ‬

‫‪its‬‬

‫ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ )ﻣﻌﻴﻦ(‪ :‬ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳـﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ‪ to‬ﻧﻤـﻲ ﺁﻳـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺟـﺰ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪ ought to‬ﻭ ‪.used to‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ‪may‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪must‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪should‬‬

‫‪14‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻦ ‪can‬‬

‫ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺑﺎ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜـﻲ ﺑـﺎ ﺭﻓـﺘﻦ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ )ﺁﻳﺎ ـ ﻣﮕﺮ ـ ﻟﺤﻦ ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤـﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ do‬ﻭ ‪ does‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﺆﺍﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺁﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺳﺆﺍﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫?‪Can you go‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﻢ ﺑﺮﻡ ‪I can go‬‬

‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻭﻱ؟‬

‫?‪Can you‬‬

‫ﻟﺤﻦ‬ ‫?‪You can‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ‪ I‬ﻭ ‪ we‬ﺑﻪ ‪ you‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪you ? :‬‬

‫‪am → are‬‬

‫‪I‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ )ﻥ( ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﻔـﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻲ ‪ (not) ،‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ‪ am not‬ﻭ ‪ may not‬ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Can not → Can ' t‬‬ ‫‪not → won' t‬‬

‫‪will‬‬

‫‪not → mustn' t‬‬

‫‪must‬‬

‫‪not → Shan' t‬‬

‫‪Shall‬‬

‫‪is not → isn' t‬‬ ‫‪are not → aren' t‬‬

‫‪15‬‬

‫‪am not → am not‬‬ ‫‪may not → may not‬‬

‫‪4‬ـ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ not‬ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ not‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺳﺮ ﺟﺎﻳﺶ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺁﻳﺎ‬

‫?‪You can’t go → can’t you go‬‬

‫ﻣﮕﺮ‬

‫?‪You can not go → can you not go‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻭﻱ؟‬

‫ﻟﺤﻦ‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‬‫‪-‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ‬

‫ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ was-were‬ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪ Has-had‬ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪ Does-did‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬

‫ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ‬ ‫)‪To be(am-is-are‬‬ ‫‪Have‬‬ ‫‪Do‬‬

‫‪ can‬ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻦ‬

‫‪could‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫‪ Should‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫‪Shall‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫‪ Would‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫‪Will‬‬

‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪ Might‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪May‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬

‫‪ Had to‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬

‫‪Must‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬

‫‪ought to‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻦ‬

‫‪16‬‬

‫‪Used to‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬

‫‪need‬‬

‫ﺟﺮﺃﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬

‫‪Dare‬‬ ‫‪Would rather‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬

‫‪Had better‬‬

‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻩ‬

‫‪:The‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ) ،‬ﺭﺍ ـ ﻛﻪ ـ ﻛﺴﺮﻩ(‬ ‫‪I eat apple.‬‬ ‫‪I eat the apple.‬‬ ‫‪I eat the apple which is red.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ " ﻣﻦ ﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﻡ"‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺐ ﻧﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﯽ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ " ﻣﻦ ﺳﻴﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﻡ"‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ . .‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﻮﻡ " ﻣﻦ ﺳﻴﺐ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﻡ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻴﺒﻲ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﻡ"‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﻳﻲ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧـﺎﮔﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ‬ ‫‪ am-is-are‬ﺑﻪ ‪ be‬ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺩﻭﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ‪ to have‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺟﺎﻫـﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺷـﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪17‬‬

‫‪must be‬‬

‫‪am → I‬‬

‫‪can have‬‬

‫‪I‬‬

‫‪have → I‬‬

‫‪I‬‬

‫‪You are → You can be‬‬

‫‪you have → you can have‬‬

‫‪He is → he must be‬‬

‫‪They have → They can have‬‬ ‫‪We have → we can have‬‬ ‫‪She has → she can have‬‬

‫‪Am‬‬ ‫‪Be‬‬

‫‪Have‬‬ ‫‪to have‬‬

‫‪Is‬‬

‫‪Has‬‬

‫‪are‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬ـ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﻲ؟‬ ‫‪2‬ـ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 2‬ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﺪﻫﻲ؟‬ ‫‪3‬ـ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻼﻕ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻢ؟‬ ‫‪4‬ـ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ؟‬ ‫‪5‬ـ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﻮ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﻫﻲ؟‬ ‫‪6‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﻧﻢ ﻣﺆﺩﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﻢ ﺗﻮﻱ ﻛﻼﺱ؟‬ ‫‪7‬ـ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻬﺮﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8‬ـ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺮﻫﺎﻳﻢ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻨﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪9‬ـ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪10‬ـ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﺨﻮﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪11‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪18‬‬

: ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ 1. Can’t you help me here every day? 2. Mustn’t you teach us here every other day at 2 o’clock? 3. Am I not bad tempered? 4. Don’t they study here every day? 5. Don’t you listen to the teacher every day? 6. Can I be polite in class? 7. My father must be kind at home. 8. My sisters may be lazy. 9. Their parents can be here. 10. My father can have lunch. 11. He may have a car

‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ‬ :"‫"ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺯ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬ ‫( ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﻭ‬to) ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬-1 used : ‫ ﻭ )ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ‬ought to ‫ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺠﺰ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ‬to ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‬-2 have ‫ ﻭ‬has ‫ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬To have ‫( ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬am-is-are) ‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬To be ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬.(to ‫ ( ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ‬have-has ‫ ﻭ‬am-is-are ) ‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻗﺼﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ‬ .‫( ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬have , be) ‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻪ‬

:‫ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻗﺼﺪﻱ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ want

‫ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻦ‬

pretend

‫ﻭﺍﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

like

‫ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬

refuse

‫ﺍﻣﺘﻨﺎﻉ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

would like

‫ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬

plan

‫ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬

hope

‫ﺍﻣﻴﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬

decide

‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬

wish

‫ﺁﺭﺯﻭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬

intend

‫ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬

19

‫ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬

‫‪be going to‬‬

‫ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪try‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻨﻔﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪hate‬‬

‫ﻗﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬

‫‪promise‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻨﻔﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪dislike‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬

‫‪prefer‬‬

‫ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ‪ must‬ﻭ ‪: have to‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺎﻛﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ( ﻣﻦ ﺣﺘﻤﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻭﻡ‬

‫‪I must go‬‬ ‫‪I have to go‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭﻡ ﺑﺮﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪must ‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ـ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ( ‪have to ‬‬ ‫‪has to ‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﻓﻮﻕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ had to ، must‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ has , have‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I will have my lunch.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻫﺎﺭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪She has a book.‬‬

‫ﺍﻭ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪have‬‬

‫داﺷﺘﻦ و ﺧﻮردن → اﺳﻢ ‪+‬‬ ‫‪has‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ (to) has , have‬ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪have‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ → ‪+ to‬‬ ‫‪has‬‬

‫‪20‬‬

:‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬ ‫ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ؟‬،‫ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬،‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬ .‫ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺑﺪﻫﻨﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ‬1 .‫ـ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ‬2 .‫ـ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﺆﺩﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ‬3 .‫ـ ﺍﻭ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬4 .‫ـ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺍﻣﺴﺎﻝ ﺯﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‬5

: ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ 1. They want to listen to the teacher every day. • Do they want to listen to the teacher every day? • They don’t want to listen to teacher every day. • Don’t they want to listen to teacher every day? 2. I must speak English every day. 3. You want to be polite here. 4. He likes to have a car. 5. We decide to be clever this year. .‫ﺏ( ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﭘﺮﺍﻧﺘﺰ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬ 1. They Study engineering ( Plan:‫) ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬ 2. Most students succeed (want) 3. We understand the lesson. (Pretend: ‫)ﻭﺍﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ 4. I work hard. (Promise ) 5. Most of the people fact/tell the truth. (refuse) 6. You are very successful. (can) 7. They practice sentence patterns (must) 8. Many students ask questions (may) 9. We are polite. (Ought to) 10. I dine with you. (would like) 11. We play football. (prefer)

21

: ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ 1. They Plan to Study engineering 2. Most students want to succeed. 3. We pretend to understand the lesson. 4. I promise to work hard. 5. Most of the people refuse to fact/tell the truth. 6. You can be very successful. 7. They must practice sentence patterns. 8. Many students may ask questions. May they not ask questions? May not they ask questions?

‫ﺳﺆاﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﯽ‬

9. We ought to be polite. ‫ → ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬Ought you to be polite? Are you ought to polite? ‫ → ﻣﻨﻔﻲ‬You ought not to be polite. You aren’t ought to polite. ‫ → ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬Ought you not to be polite? aren't you ought to polite? 10. I would like to dine with you. 11. We prefer to play football.

22

‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ )ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ(‬

‫‪Simple Present Tense‬‬

‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪ :‬ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ to‬ﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ )‪ (it-she-he‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ )‪ (ies-es-s‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ‪ s‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪He works/she eats/it runs‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ‪ es‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ z,o,x,ch,sh,s‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ‪ es‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Washes/buzzes/watches/fixes/misses/mixes‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ y‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﺩﺍﺭ ”‪ “a,e,I,o,u‬ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪s‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Æ Plays‬ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ‪play Æ‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ y‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ‪ y‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ‪ i‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ es‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Carry Æ carries‬‬ ‫‪StudyÆ studies‬‬

‫‪23‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪every +‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‬

‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪each +‬‬

‫) ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺭﻭﺯ ‪ ( during the day‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪during +‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻚ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ‪ ( every other week‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪every other +‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ever – never – always – usually – often – sometimes‬‬ ‫‪They never play golf.‬‬ ‫ﻼ ﺍﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺳـﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﺑﺎ ﺣﻘﺎﻳﻖ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬ ‫‪The sun sets in the west.‬‬

‫ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻏﺮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ ‪ :‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ does ,do‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ ‪ s ) does :‬ﭘﺮﺍﻥ‪ es -‬ﭘﺮﺍﻥ‪ ies -‬ﭘﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ‪ doesn’t‬ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ :‬ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪He goes to school every day.‬‬

‫‪24‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 2‬ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻭﺝ‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺩ‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﭘﺪﺭﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ‬

‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‪:‬‬ ‫‪He goes to school every day.‬‬ ‫‪The teacher helps us in the class at 2 o’clock on odd days.‬‬ ‫‪My father studies at home on even days.‬‬ ‫‪His father wants to help them here every day‬‬

‫‪25‬‬

‫‪1.‬‬ ‫‪2.‬‬ ‫‪3.‬‬ ‫‪4.‬‬

‫‪Question Words.‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪ who‬ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ whom‬ﻛﻲ ﺭﺍ ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺭﺍ‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪ what‬ﭼﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪ where‬ﻛﺠﺎ‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ‬

‫‪ when‬ﭼﻪ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ -‬ﻛﻲ‬

‫‪ -6‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ‬

‫‪ how many‬ﭼﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬

‫‪ -7‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ‬

‫‪ how much‬ﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬

‫‪ -8‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ‬

‫‪ how‬ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ‬

‫‪ -9‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ‪ what time‬ﭼﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫‪ -10‬ﺍﮔﺮﻣﺪﺕ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ‬

‫‪ how long‬ﭼﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ‬

‫‪ -11‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ‬

‫‪ how often‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﻓﻌﻪ‬

‫‪ -12‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ‬

‫اﺳﻢ ‪ whose +‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫‪ -13‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ an, a‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-14‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ + the‬ﺻﻔﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ that ,this ,those ,these +‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ‬ ‫‪ which‬ﻛﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -15‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ‬

‫‪ why‬ﭼﺮﺍ‬

‫‪ -16‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ‬

‫‪ how old‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻟﻪ‬

‫‪ -17‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ‬

‫‪ how far‬ﭼﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -18‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ‬

‫‪ how tall‬ﭼﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﻱ‬

‫‪ -19‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ‬

‫‪ how fast‬ﭼﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ -20‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ‬

‫‪ what color‬ﭼﻪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ‬

‫‪26‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪(wh questions):‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ‪ -1‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺘﻤﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Where‬‬ ‫‪When‬‬ ‫?‪do you work‬‬

‫‪How‬‬ ‫‪Why‬‬

‫‪+‬‬

‫‪What time‬‬ ‫‪How often‬‬ ‫‪How fast‬‬

‫?‪Can you answer‬‬

‫‪I can answer Æ‬‬

‫?‪can you answer‬‬

‫‪Why‬‬

‫?‪can you answer‬‬

‫‪When‬‬

‫?‪How fast can you answer‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ‪ -2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Where do you go? Æ I know where you go‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺪﻭﻧﻢ ﻛﺠﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻱ‬

‫‪Why don’t they study Æ I know why they don’t study‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻭﻧﻢ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪I am sure why he is happy‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺍﻭ ﺧﻮﺷﺤﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ‪ -3‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﻨﺸﻴﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ s‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ es‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ‪ ies‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪He works‬‬

‫ﺍﻭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬

‫?‪Who works‬‬

‫ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ ؟‬

‫?‪Whose brother works‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭ ﻛﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ؟‬

‫‪27‬‬

‫?‪Which teacher works‬‬

‫ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ؟‬

‫?‪What kind of student works‬‬

‫ﭼﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ؟‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺪﻭﻧﻢ ﻛﺠﺎ ﻓﻮﺗﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻲ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪: 2‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﻭﻧﻢ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻨﻢ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭ ﻛﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ؟‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻨﺒﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ‪.‬‬

‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‪:‬‬

‫‪I know where you play football every day at 2 o’clock.‬‬ ‫‪I don’t know why the students don’t study at school.‬‬ ‫‪I am sure why they are tired.‬‬ ‫?‪Do you know whose brother wants to speak English‬‬ ‫‪I am not sure why they are lazy in class.‬‬

‫‪28‬‬

‫‪1.‬‬ ‫‪2.‬‬ ‫‪3.‬‬ ‫‪4.‬‬ ‫‪5.‬‬

have to ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ‬

: ( have to ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ)ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ .‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭﻧﺪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ‬-6 ‫ ﭘﺴﺮﻩ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭﻩ ﻣﺆﺩﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ‬-7 ‫ ﺩﺧﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭﻧﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺩ‬-8 ‫ ﺍﻭ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭﻩ ﻓﻮﺗﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻛﻨﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ‬-9 ‫ﻋﻠﻲ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭﻩ ﺧﻮﺷﺤﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ‬-10

:‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ 6. They have to speak English in class. 7. The boy has to be polite in class every day. Does the boy have to be polite in class every day? The boy doesn’t have to be polite in class every day. 8. The girls have to be here on even days. Do the girls have to be here on even days? 9. He has to play football every other day.

‫ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬

Does he have to play football every other day?

‫ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬

He doesn’t have to play football every other day.

‫ﻣﻨﻔﻲ‬

Doesn’t he have to play football every other day?

‫ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ‬

10. Ali has to be happy in class Does Ali have to be happy in class?

‫ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬

29

‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ‪ :‬ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‪-‬ﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ -‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪-‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪-‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪-‬ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫»ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ« ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪be +ing‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪subject + to be + verb + ing‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ ‪ be :‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ are,is,am‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ‪ ing‬ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ are , is , am‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ :‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ‪ are,is,am‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺏ‪ :‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ‪ ing‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺝ‪ :‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ‬ ‫ﻼ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ‪ -‬ﻓﻌ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ‬

‫‪now‬‬ ‫‪at present‬‬ ‫‪for the time being‬‬ ‫‪at the moment‬‬ ‫‪This morning‬‬

‫‪30‬‬

‫‪This year‬‬ ‫‪This week‬‬ ‫ﺩ‪ :‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﺵ‬

‫!‪hush up‬‬ ‫‪stop‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻇﺐ ﺑﺎﺵ‬

‫‪keep‬‬

‫ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻦ‬

‫‪look‬‬

‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﻦ‬

‫‪listen‬‬ ‫‪be careful‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺵ‬

‫‪Listen! Someone’s knocking the door‬‬

‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﻦ – ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻪ!‬

‫‪Look! Someone is coming.‬‬ ‫‪Be careful he is eavesdropping.‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺵ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺳﻤﻊ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻪ!‬

‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪ ing -like-know-understand-want‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ ing‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ‪ y‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ‪ ing‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﭼﺴﺒﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪PlayÆplaying‬‬ ‫‪StudyÆstudying‬‬ ‫‪CarryÆcarrying‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ e‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‪ ing‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ‪ e‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ‪ ing‬ﻣﻲ ﻧﺸﻴﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﻓﻌﻞ‬ ‫‪ be‬ﻛﻪ ‪ e‬ﺁﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Come Æcoming‬‬ ‫‪Take Ætaking‬‬ ‫‪Have Æhaving‬‬

‫‪31‬‬

‫‪Be Æbeing‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ)‪ (a,e,i,o,u‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‪ ing‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ‪ ing‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SitÆ sitting‬‬ ‫‪Put Æ putting‬‬ ‫‪Read Æ reading‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ ie‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ ing‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ‪ ie‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ‪ ing‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻦ‬

‫‪tie Æ tying‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪die Æ dying‬‬

‫ﻟﻢ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ –ﺩﺭﺍﺯ ﮐﺸیﺪﻥ‬

‫‪32‬‬

‫‪lie Æ lying‬‬

‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ :‬ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪ ed‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ied‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ‪:‬‬

‫‪see Æ saw‬‬

‫)ﺷﮑﻞ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪:‬‬

‫‪work Æ worked‬‬

‫)‪( ed-ied‬‬

‫‪do Æ did‬‬ ‫‪am , is Æ was‬‬ ‫‪are Æ were‬‬ ‫‪have Æ had‬‬ ‫‪go Æ went‬‬ ‫‪come Æ came‬‬ ‫‪see Æ saw‬‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ did‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ did‬ﻳﺎ ‪ didn’t‬ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ‪ ed‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ied‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪:‬‬

‫‪33‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ‪ ed‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ied‬ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ‪ yesterday Æ‬و ‪last day‬‬ ‫‪the other day Æ‬‬

‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ‬

‫‪two days ago Æ‬‬

‫ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ‬

‫‪ Æ‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪in +‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ )‪( in 1920‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ‪ :‬ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ y‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ed‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪play Æ played‬‬ ‫‪stay Æ stayed‬‬ ‫‪∗say Æ said‬‬ ‫‪∗pay Æ paid‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ y‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ‪ y‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ‬

‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ‪ i‬ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ ed‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ‪ ied‬ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪carry Æ carried‬‬ ‫‪study Æ studied‬‬ ‫‪try Æ tried‬‬

‫‪34‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 2‬ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﺎ ﺩﻳﺪﻳﻢ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﺭﻙ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 5‬ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﺎ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﺳﺘﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﻢ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﺎ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ ﻣﺆﺩﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪1367‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻣﺎ ﺧﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻳﻢ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﭘﺴﺮﻩ ﭘﺎﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﺒﻞ ﺑﻮﺩ‬

‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1-They helped us in the class at 2 o’clock yesterday.‬‬ ‫‪2-We saw you in the park at 5 o’clock last week.‬‬ ‫‪3- We wanted to go to school the other day.‬‬ ‫‪4-We liked to be polite in the class in 1367 year.‬‬ ‫‪5- We were tired yesterday.‬‬ ‫‪6- The boy was lazy last year.‬‬

‫‪35‬‬

:‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺢ‬ To Do You

did.

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

Did you do? ‫ﮐﻤﮑﯽ‬

‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬

He does.

Does he do?

Did he do?

Yes he did.

.‫ ﺗﻮ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻭﻱ‬-1

You had to go. Did you have to go? You didn’t have to go

‫ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﻲ‬

.‫ ﺍﻭ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‬-2 He has to go. Does he have to go?

‫ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ‬

.‫ ﺍﻭ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ‬-3 He had to teach. Did he have to teach?

. ‫ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ‬-4 My father was here yesterday.

.‫ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻬﺮﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﭘﺎﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬-5 Their parents were kind last year.

.‫ﻣﻦ ﭘﺎﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ‬-6 36

‫‪I was teacher last year.‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻧﺪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺁﻣﺪ‬ ‫‪They were studying when my father came in.‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭﻡ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻧﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺯﺩ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺩ‬ ‫‪My brother was playing the piano when his teacher rang.‬‬

‫‪ -9‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺁﻣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Their parents were watching the news when it was raining.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ :‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ‪ when‬ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪37‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﺋﻴﻢ )‪ (to‬ﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﺋﻴﻢ ‪ you‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫‪please Æ‬‬

‫ﻟﻄﻔﹰﺎ‬

‫‪will you ( please) Æ‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ) ﻟﻄﻔﹰﺎ(‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﺣﻤﺘﻲ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻪ‬

‫‪would you Æ‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻩ‬

‫‪could you Æ‬‬

‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﻛﻨﻜﻮﺭﻱ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ ing‬ﺩﺍﺭ ‪would you mind +‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ ing‬ﺩﺍﺭ ‪+‬‬

‫‪do you mind‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ‪ you‬ﺑﻮﺩ ‪ you‬ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ‪ to be‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ‪ you‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ‪ aren’t‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ‪don’t be‬‬‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻳﻚ ‪ again‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫) ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ( ‪ ) Æ don’t go again‬ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ( ‪you don’t go‬‬ ‫) ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻲ ﻫﺎ (‬

‫‪) Æ don’t be again‬ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ( ‪you aren’t‬‬ ‫) ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ(‬

‫‪38‬‬

‫‪don’t (you) ever go (again).‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻟﻄﻔﹰﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻟﻄﻔﹰﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﺣﻤﺘﻲ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻟﻄﻔﹰﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﺆﺩﺏ ﺑﺎﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﻟﻄﻔﹰﺎ ﺧﻮﺷﺤﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﻓﻮﺗﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﻜﻦ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -8‬ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻜﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺭﻭ ﺗﺨﺘﻪ ﻧﻨﻮﻳﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺗﻨﺒﻞ ﻧﺒﺎﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -11‬ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺑﺪ ﺍﺧﻼﻕ ﻧﺒﺎﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -12‬ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺑﻲ ﺍﺩﺏ ﻧﺒﺎﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‪:‬‬

‫‪1-Please study here every day.‬‬ ‫‪2-Please write a letter.‬‬ ‫‪3-Would you please speak English.‬‬ ‫‪4-Would you mind listening to the teacher.‬‬ ‫‪5-Please be polite here.‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬

6-Please be happy. 7-Don’t play football here again. 8-Don’t open the door again. 9-Don’t write on the black board again. 10-Don’t be lazy again. 11-Don’t be bad temper again. 12-Don’t be rude again.

:‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬ . ‫ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ‬-1 I work here every day. I am working here now.

‫ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

I worked here yesterday.

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

I was working here yesterday.

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

Work here every day.

‫ﺍﻣﺮﻱ‬

.‫ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺧﺮﺩ‬-2 My father will buy a car tomorrow. .‫ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻡ‬-3 I will pass in the next year. .‫ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻪ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‬-4

40

They will be here in three weeks. .‫ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺰﻭﺩﻱ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ‬-5 We will win soon. .‫ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻭﺩ ﺯﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﺪ‬-6 You will be clever sooner or later. ‫ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﹰﺍ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬-7 Ali will study later.

41

‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪Simple future tense :‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ‪ :‬ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ‪ +‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ + will / shall +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ )‪ (will‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ‪ shall‬ﻫﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ will‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ shall‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬ ‫)‪( tomorrow‬‬

‫ﺏ( ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ‬

‫ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺩﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺯﻭﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻭﺩ‬

‫‪tomorrow‬‬ ‫‪soon‬‬ ‫‪sooner or later‬‬

‫ﺗﺎ ﺳﻪ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫‪three weeks‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪next +‬‬

‫‪ ( a week/ a year/ a month‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪in+‬‬

‫)ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪،‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ will‬ﻳﺎ ‪ shall‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ not‬ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪ won’t‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ shan’t‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ will‬ﻳﺎ ‪ shall‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﮕﺮ‬

‫‪Æ‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬

‫‪unless‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ‬

‫‪if Æ‬‬

whenÆ

‫ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ‬

as long as Æ

while Æ

‫ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ‬

suppose Æ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ‬

before Æ

‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬

as soon as Æ ‫ﺑﻤﺤﺾ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ‬

after Æ

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ‬

till Æ until Æ

to pass Æ

‫ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻣﻴﻜﻪ‬

‫ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ‬

‫ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ‬

: ‫ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬

( I ) ‫ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬+ before + ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ‬ ( II ) before + ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻝ‬ You will pass if you study. If you study you will pass. I will call you as soon as I get home. As soon as I get home , I will call you.

43

‫ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ )ﻛﻪ ( ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﻪﺟﺎﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ that‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ )‪(1‬‬

‫ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ‪ +‬ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ‪ + that +‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ‪ +‬ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫‪2.‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪1.‬‬

‫‪that‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2.‬‬

‫‪1.‬‬

‫‪I know that you come.‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﻭﻧﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻲ‬

‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ )‪ :(2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ‪ that‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ‪ to‬ﻣﻲ ﻧﺸﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1. 2. 3 to 2. 3‬‬

‫‪1. 2. 3 that 1. 2. 3‬‬

‫‪I want you that you go Æ I want you to go‬‬

‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ )‪ : (3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﺶ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻫﻢ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ‪ that‬ﻭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ‪ not to‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I want you that you don’t go.‬‬ ‫‪I want you not to go.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ :‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ not‬ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(to go Æ not to go‬‬ ‫)‪(to be or not to be‬‬ ‫)ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻦ(‬

‫‪Not to go‬‬ ‫‪Not to come‬‬

‫‪44‬‬

‫‪not to write‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ )‪ :(4‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ‪ that‬ﻭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪ to‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪let‬‬

‫ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪I let you go.‬‬

‫‪Æ‬‬

‫‪I let you that you go. Æ I let you to go‬‬ ‫‪make‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪I make you that you be. Æ I make you to be Æ I make you be.‬‬ ‫‪see‬‬

‫ﺩﻳﺪﻥ‬ ‫‪It helps to prevent‬‬

‫ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪help‬‬

‫ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ‬

‫‪hear‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪watch‬‬ ‫‪observe‬‬ ‫‪feel‬‬

‫ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬

‫‪have‬‬

‫ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻦ‬

‫‪know‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪notice‬‬

‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ )‪ :(5‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ‪ that‬ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ ing‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ go.‬ﻳﺎ ‪I see you that you go. Æ I see you going‬‬ ‫‪ go.‬ﻳﺎ ‪I saw you that you go. Æ I saw you going‬‬

‫‪45‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻓﻮﺗﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﻜﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻮﺷﺤﺎﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺗﻨﺒﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻲ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﻧﺪﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮ ﺭﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪1. want you not to play football here.‬‬ ‫‪2. I am happy that you are lazy.‬‬ ‫‪3. They like to speak English.‬‬ ‫‪4. I let you laugh here every day.‬‬ ‫‪5. I saw you studying.‬‬ ‫‪6. I see you listening to the teacher.‬‬

‫‪46‬‬

‫ﺩﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‬

‫‪tell & say‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺪ ) ﮔﻔﺘﻦ( ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ‪ say‬ﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫‪ said‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻑ ) ﺑﻪ ( ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ) ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ( ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪ tell‬ﻛﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺁﻥ ‪ told‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ )ﺭﺍ( ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﮔﻔﺘﻦ( ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ‪ mean‬ﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺁﻥ ‪ meant‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Æ‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﺍ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻢ ‪ /‬ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻡ ﺗﻮ ﻫﺴﺘﻲ‬

‫‪I mean you‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ ‪ :‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ tell‬از ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ say to‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﻤﹰﺎ ‪ tell‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻭﻍ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ‬

‫‪to tell a lie Æ‬‬

‫ﺩﺍﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ‬

‫‪to tell a story /tale‬‬

‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ‬

‫‪to tell a fact Æ‬‬

‫ﺟﻚ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ‬

‫‪to tell a joke Æ‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ‬

‫‪to tell the time Æ‬‬

‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ‬

‫‪to tell one’s name Æ‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬

‫‪to tell the fortune Æ‬‬

‫ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ‬

‫‪47‬‬

‫‪to tell the difference Æ‬‬ ‫‪to tell the news Æ‬‬ ‫‪to tell the secret Æ‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻧﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ‪ :‬ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ every day‬ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻧﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪usually Æ‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ‬

‫‪hardly Æ‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ‬

‫‪some times Æ‬‬

‫ﻏﺎﻟﺒﹰﺎ‬

‫‪frequently Æ‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﺪﺭﺕ‬

‫‪rarely Æ‬‬

‫‪often Æ‬‬

‫ﺍﻏﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ‬

‫‪always Æ‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﺪﺭﺕ‬

‫‪seldom Æ‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻﹰ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣﹰﺎ‬

‫‪generally Æ‬‬ ‫‪scarely Æ‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﺪﺭﺕ‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ever‬ﺑﻪ ‪ never‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ‪ 4‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I always go there.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪They are always late.‬‬

‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪They can always play.‬‬

‫‪48‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫?‪Do you often go there‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻡ – ﻣﻦ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Yes I often do. - I often go there.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺎﹰﻛﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫) ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ‪ 2‬ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ )(.‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﺎﮐﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ do‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪(.‬‬

‫‪I always do go.‬‬ ‫‪I never did go.‬‬

‫‪49‬‬

‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺁﺏ ← ﺁﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﻳﺎ‬

‫ﭘﻮﻝ ← ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‬

‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻋﻼﺋﻤﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪،‬‬

‫ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ The‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ )ﺭﺍ‪ -‬ﻛﻪ – ﻛﺴﺮﻩ( ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ – ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬

‫‪a-an‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻊ – ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬

‫‪some‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ – ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻭ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‬

‫‪any‬‬ ‫‪She has a pen.‬‬

‫‪She has some pens‬‬ ‫?‪Dose she have any pen‬‬ ‫?‪Doesn’t she have any pen‬‬

‫‪ an , a‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ u‬ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ) ﻳﻮ( ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (a‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ )‪ (u‬ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ )ﺁ( ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (an‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ Æ (a‬ﻳﻮ ‪ Å u Æ‬ﺁ ‪(an) Å‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﮕﺎﻩ‬

‫‪50‬‬

‫‪a university‬‬

‫‪a used car‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻬﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﭼﺘﺮ‬

‫‪an umbrella‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﻋﻤﻮ‬

‫‪an uncle‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ )‪ (one‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ )‪ (a‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪A one story building.‬‬ ‫‪A one eyed man.‬‬ ‫‪A one celled animal.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ )‪ (h‬ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (a‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ )‪ (h‬ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ‪ an‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ )ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ(‬

‫‪an hour‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺩ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻜﺎﺭ‬

‫‪an honest man‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺩ ﭘﺮ ﺍﻓﺘﺨﺎﺭ‬

‫‪an honor man‬‬ ‫‪a hand‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺖ‬

‫‪a hen‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﻍ‬

‫‪a hat‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﻛﻼﻩ‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ )‪ :(1‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ the‬ﺑﺎ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﻮﻫﻬﺎ – ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻫﺎ‪ -‬ﺭﻭﺩﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ -‬ﺟﻨﮕﻠﻬﺎ‪ -‬ﺧﻠﻴﺠﻬﺎ –ﺻﺤﺮﺍﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ )‪ :(2‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ the‬ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪The god, The sun, The earth, The moon, The sky‬‬ ‫•‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ The‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫‪51‬‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎﻝ‬

‫‪The north‬‬

‫ﺟﻨﻮﺏ‬

‫‪The south‬‬

‫•‬

‫ﺷﺮﻕ‬

‫‪The east‬‬

‫ﻏﺮﺏ‬

‫‪The west‬‬

‫ﻗﻄﺐ ﺷﻤﺎﻝ‬

‫‪The north pole‬‬

‫ﻗﻄﺐ ﺟﻨﻮﺏ‬

‫‪The south pole‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺬﻫﺒﻲ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ The‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪The bible‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺁﻥ‬

‫‪The koran‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺭﺍﺕ‬

‫‪The torah‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ made of‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Butter is made of the milk.‬‬ ‫•‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ )‪ (′s‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ The‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺷﻬﺮ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﻫﺎ ‪ The‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻳﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﹰﺎ ‪ The‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺪﻩ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬

‫‪The United States of America‬‬ ‫‪The Soviet Union‬‬

‫ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻳﻪ ﺟﻤﺎﻫﻴﺮ ﺷﻮﺭﻭﻱ‬

‫‪The Nether land‬‬

‫ﻫﻠﻨﺪ‬

‫‪52‬‬

‫ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﻧﺸﻴﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‬

‫ﺟﻤﻊ‬ ‫‪ours‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ‬

‫‪mine‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ‬

‫‪yours‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ‬

‫‪yours‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬

‫‪theirs‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ‬

‫ﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻭ)ﻣﺬﻛﺮ(‬

‫‪his‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻭ )ﻣﺆﻧﺚ(‬

‫‪hers‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ )ﺷﻲﺀ(‬

‫‪its‬‬

‫‪it is mine book.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﮑﻲ‬

‫‪53‬‬

‫‪Æ‬‬

‫‪book‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫‪It is my‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﮑﯽ‬

‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﺖ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﺴﺮﻩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻛﺴﺮﻩ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ )‪(of‬‬

‫•‬

‫ﺩ ِﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ‪Å‬‬

‫‪the door of the class‬‬

‫ﻱ ﻣﻴﺰ ‪Å‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ِ‬

‫‪the legs of the table‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻛﺴﺮﻩ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ )‪(′s‬‬

‫•‬

‫ﻣﺎﺩ ِﺭ ﻋﻠﻲ ‪Å‬‬

‫‪Ali’s mother‬‬

‫ﺏ ﻋﻠﻲ ‪Å‬‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎ ِ‬

‫‪Ali’s book‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺎ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ s‬ﻳﺎ ‪ es‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ies‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ )‪ (′s‬ﻓﻘﻂ )‪ (,‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ ﻭ )‪(s‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺍﻥ‬

‫•‬

‫‪Å‬‬

‫‪the students’ parents‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ )‪ (′s‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪Å‬‬

‫•‬

‫‪the children’s parents‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ )‪ (′s‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ‪Å‬‬

‫‪today’s news‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ‪Å‬‬

‫‪tomorrow’s news‬‬

‫‪54‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ »ﺍﺯ« ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‬ .‫ ﺍ ِﺯ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬: (‫ )ﺍﺯ‬of -1 One of the students Five of the chairs Ten of the cars : ‫ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻭ ﺟﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ‬: from -2 Take the knife from the child. Take the book from the desk. I work here from morning to / till night. I walk from here to/till my house. from here to my house is 2 kilometers.

to be from

Æ

‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻫﻞ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬

to come from

Æ

‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻫﻞ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬ :‫ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬.‫ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬: out of -3

I go out of the class. I pulled him out of the pool. out of sight , out of mind

.‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻝ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ ﻫﺮ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﻓﺖ‬

my car is out of order

.‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻢ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

out of the work

.‫ﺑﻴﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬

out of the practice

.‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬

55

‫‪ : through -4‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻭ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺩﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺳﺘﺎ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪The river passes through this village.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﻧﻢ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I can see through the glass.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻜﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Don’t look through the pipe.‬‬ ‫ﺁﺏ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪The water passes through the pipe.‬‬ ‫‪ : than -5‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻱ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ er‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ‪ more‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫) ﭘﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ (‬

‫‪old → elder → eldest‬‬ ‫‪old → older → oldest‬‬

‫)ﻗﺸﻨﮓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺸﻨﮓﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺸﻨﮓﺗﺮﻳﻦ( ‪beautiful → more beautiful → the most beautiful‬‬ ‫‪My brother is older than me.‬‬ ‫‪: since -6‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻛﻪ – ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ – ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ – ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Since you are my friend I want to help you.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Since he is a good worker, I want to employ him.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺮ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻨﻢ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ : how -7‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺠﺎ‪ -‬ﭼﻄﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫?‪How do you know my name‬‬ ‫‪56‬‬

How do you know my address? How do you know my telephone number? . ‫ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻥ‬to buy Æ at -8 . ‫ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻥ‬to buy Æfrom

I bought the book from Ali. I bought the book from my father. I bought the book from my teacher. I bought the bread at the baker’s. I buy the meat at the butcher’s

57

Future Continuous Tense

« ‫» ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‬will ‫ ﻭﻳﺎ‬shall ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬ .‫ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬

Subject + shall /will + be + V.ing I shall be working I will be working He/she/it will be working You will be working We shall be working We will be working They will be working .‫ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬will ‫ ﻭ‬shall ‫ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ‬: ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ .‫ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‬I, We ‫ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ‬ I shan’t be studying. you won’t be going swinming. Shall I be seeing you tomorrow? Will you be coming here tomorrow? Shan’t I be working all day? Won’t they be watching TV tonight ?

:‫ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‬:‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ : ‫ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ‬-‫ﺍﻟﻒ‬ .‫ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﺻﺒﺢ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ‬ We will be sitting in the class and studying tomorrow morning.

: ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ‬-‫ﺏ‬ I will be seeing you tomorrow

.‫ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺖ‬ 58

We will be having a test next week

.‫ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‬

: ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ all + ‫ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬Æ all day tomorrow ‫ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬+ ‫ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬Æ This time next session At 7 o’clock next session At 9 o’clock tomorrow/ tonight

: ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬ .‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬-1 .‫ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻡ‬-2 .‫ ﺍﻭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻛﻤﻜﻢ ﻛﻨﻪ‬-3 .‫ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻴﺪﻭﻧﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﺮﺍ ﺍﺫﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻲ‬-4 .‫ ﺍﻭ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ‬-5 1- I had to be sure that that book didn’t belong to you. 2- I had to do every thing that he told me. 3- He said that he couldn’t help me in this time. 4- I didn’t know that you wanted to bother me. 5-He thought that you might not come here.

59

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻣﺸﺐ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 8‬ﭼﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ؟ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺏ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺗﻮ ﻫﺴﺘﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﺎ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻩ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺭﺿﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻧﻮ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﻭﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫?‪1- Will you be working all the day tomorrow‬‬ ‫‪2- What will you be doing at 8 o’clock tonight? I am watching TV.‬‬ ‫‪3- I will come at three o’clock good!/well! I will be waiting for you.‬‬ ‫‪4- We had better go out because Reza will be playing the piano.‬‬ ‫‪5- Do you think when we get there, they will be waiting for us.‬‬

‫‪60‬‬

‫ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪:‬‬

‫‪Sequence of tenses‬‬

‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻨﻄﻮﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﻩ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﺍﺵ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺶ ﻣﻴﮕﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪He said that he had to do whatever his elder brother said.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻭ ﺧﻮﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻭ ﺍﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪He knew well that he didn’t have the right to fire me.‬‬

‫‪61‬‬

‫» ‪«Used to‬‬ ‫ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫) ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ‪ -‬ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻬﺎ – ﺍﻭﻧﺮﻭﺯﻫﺎ‪ -‬ﺟﻮﺍﻧﻴﻬﺎ( ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ did‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪He used to smoke a lot.‬‬

‫ﺍﻭ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺳﻴﮕﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫?‪Did you use to study here‬‬

‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﻮ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻱ‪.‬‬

‫‪I didn’t use to see him very often.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﻳﺪﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ‬

‫‪else where :‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ‬

‫‪someone else :‬‬

‫‪ : Used to‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻧﺎﻇﻢ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪He used to be the dean of high school but he isn’t now ,again.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ used to‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ would‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ‪ -‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬

‫ﻳﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ‬

‫‪62‬‬

‫‪used to/would Æ‬‬ ‫‪used to Æ‬‬

‫‪else where :‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ‬

‫‪someone else :‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﻲ ﭘﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﺎﺩﺭﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Whenever I needed some money, I used to/would go to my mother.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻭ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪He used to work else where.‬‬

‫ﻼ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ؟‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﭘﺪﺭﺕ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬ ‫?‪Did your father use to have a car‬‬

‫ﻼ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﺑﻴﺪﻡ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬ ‫‪I used to sleep late, but I get up early now.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻣﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪We used to live another the city.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Some one else used to be our teacher.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‪:‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ / ing‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ /‬ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ‪+‬‬

‫‪To be used to‬‬

‫‪ to get used to‬ﻳﺎ‪to be used to‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ) ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ To get used to‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ) ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪63‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺕ ﺯﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﺯﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ‬

‫‪to take a nap :‬‬ ‫‪to do exercises :‬‬ ‫‪or else :‬‬

‫‪She is used to cats.‬‬ ‫‪She is used to her mother.‬‬ ‫‪She is used to taking a nap after lunch.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌــﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳــﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻣــﻲ ﺗــﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳــﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺿــﻤﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳــﺎ ﻓﻌــﻞ ‪ ing‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷــﺖ ‪ used‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳــﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟــﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺑــﺮ ﻛﻠﻤــﻪ‬ ‫‪ accustomed‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎﻫﺎ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻢ ﻛﻢ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Some of you aren’t used to standing in front of the class but don’t worry, gradually‬‬ ‫‪you will get used to it.‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺳﻴﮕﺎﺭ ﻧﻜﺶ ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ ﺑﻬﺶ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻼ ﺧﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﺻ ﹰ‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﺒﺤﻬﺎ ﻭﺭﺯﺵ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪64‬‬

.‫ ﺍﻭﻟﺶ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ‬-4 .‫ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﻳﻚ ﭼﺮﺕ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‬-5 .‫ ﻧﻪ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻡ – ﻧﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﺒﺎﺵ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ‬،‫ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬-6 .‫ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﺨﻮﻧﻪ‬-7

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

I Don’t smoke so much, or else you will get used to it. I’m not tired at all. I’m used to working for hours. He is used to doing exercises every morning. At first, we weren’t used to this teacher but , at last we got used to him. He is used to take a nap after lunch. Are you used to living in this area. No I am not (used to living here) Don’t worry, at last you get used to it. He is used to reading book before sleeping.

65

‫» ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ‬

‫« ‪Question tag‬‬

‫ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ) ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ ‪ -‬ﻣﮕﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻃـﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ‪ -‬ﻭ ﻫﺎﻥ(ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻭ ‪ not‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ؟ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﯼ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ؟‬ ‫?‪We must obey the regulations , mustn’t we‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻬﻤﻮﻥ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻪ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ؟ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻬﻤﻮﻥ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﻧﻪ؟‬ ‫?‪He can trust us , can’t he‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺁﻥ ﭼﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﮔﻔﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻭﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ؟ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮ ﮔﻔﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻭﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻡ؟‬ ‫?‪I believed what you said , didn’t I‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻼ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺳﮓ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﺮﺳﺪ – ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ؟‬ ‫?‪She isn’t afraid of the dog, is she‬‬

‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺗﻬﺎﻡ ﺩﺯﺩﻱ ﻧﺰﺩﻧﺪ – ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ؟‬ ‫?‪They didn’t accuse him of stealing, did they‬‬

‫ﺗﻮ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻬﺖ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺧﻨﮓ‪ -‬ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ؟‬ ‫?‪You don’t like to be called stupid, do you‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ ‪ : 1‬ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ am not‬ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ‪ aren’t I‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ‪ am I not‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪66‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻭﻓﺎﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ؟‬ ‫?‪I am faithful to ypu ,aren’t I‬‬ ‫?‪I am faitful to you, am I not‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﭽﻪﻫﺎ ﻣﻬﺮﺑﺎﻧﻢ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ؟‬ ‫?‪I am kind to the children, aren’t I‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ ‪ : 2‬ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑـﺎ‬ ‫‪ there‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﭘﻮﻝ ﺧﻮﺷﺒﺨﺘﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ‬ ‫?‪Money doesn’t bring luck, does it‬‬

‫ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻨﺪ ﺑﻤﻮﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫?‪The students are willing to stay more, aren’t they‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﺿﺎ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫?‪Ali reza is waiting outside, isn’t he‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻛﻼﺱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫?‪There is no class today, is there‬‬

‫ﺁﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫?‪That book doesn’t belong to you, does it‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ ‪ : 3‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Hardly / Never / Barely / No / Seldom/ None/ Rarely/ Little / Scarcely / Few‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﺳﻪ؟ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪67‬‬

Money goes nowhere nowadays, does it?

.‫ﻟﻴﻼ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺩﺭﻭﻍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ‬ Leyla never tells lise, dose she?

shall we ‫ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ) ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ( ﺿـﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﺳـﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺷـﺎﻥ‬let’s ‫ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ‬: 4 ‫ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ‬ : ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﻲ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻬﺶ ﺑﮕﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺎﻱ؟‬ Let’s go to tell him every thing , shall we? Let’s study together, shall we?

:‫ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﭼﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‬tag : 5 ‫ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ‬ Will you- would you- can you- could you Do me a favor, will you? Come and see us, will you? Don’t be so stingy, will you?

68

‫‪Avoid Repatition‬‬

‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ a‬ﻭ ‪ an‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ‪ one‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ Any & some .‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑـﺎ ‪ no‬ﻣﻨﻔـﻲ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺯ ‪ none‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ) ﻫـﻢ ( ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻣـﻲ‬

‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ‪ too‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ‪ either‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪I want to buy a car.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫‪a/an‬‬

‫)‪(1‬‬ ‫‪one, too‬‬ ‫‪I want to buy one, too.‬‬

‫‪I like some cold drink.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪Some‬‬

‫)‪(2‬‬ ‫‪I like some, too.‬‬

‫‪I don’t have any change.‬‬

‫‪some, too‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪any‬‬

‫)‪(3‬‬ ‫‪I don’t have any, either.‬‬

‫‪We have no class today.‬‬ ‫)‪(4‬‬ ‫‪We have none, either.‬‬ ‫‪69‬‬

‫‪any, either‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫‪no‬‬

‫‪none, either‬‬

to know of: to be willing: party :

‫ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻬﻤﺎﻧﻲ‬ .‫ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﺨﺮﻡ‬.‫ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻴﻮﻩ ﺑﺨﺮﻡ‬-1

I want to buy some fruit , I want to buy some too.

.‫ ﺍﻭ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‬-2 He has a lot of good friends in this class, I have some too

.‫ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻡ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﺍﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬-3 I have no time to answer the telephone , he doesn’t have any either.

.‫ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﻭ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‬. ‫ ﻣﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺭﻭ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‬-4 I know of a good doctor, I know of one too

.‫ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻬﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻭﻧﺪ‬-5 They arent willing to go to that party , either.

70

‫‪The additions‬‬

‫» ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ «‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ » ﻫﻢ _ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ « ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ‪ +‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ Æ so +‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬ ‫‪ +too‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ‪ Æ‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ‪ +‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ Æ neither +‬ﻣﻨﻔﻲ‬ ‫‪ + either‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ‪ +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ‪ Æ‬ﻣﻨﻔﻲ‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﺳﺮ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪He is in a good mood today, so am I/ I am too.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻭ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭﺵ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪He used to study here, so did his brother/ his brother did too.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻭ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ – ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺮﻫﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪He doesn’t have to work with you, neither do the workers/ the workers don’t either.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻭ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺶ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪He won’t attend the class tomorrow, his friend won’t either/ neither will his friend.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﺗﺸﻜﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I thanked him, so did ali.‬‬ ‫‪71‬‬

.‫ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻼﻡ ﻧﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﺍﺷﺶ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ‬-6 He didn’t say hello to me, neither did his brother.

.‫ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ‬-7 He is one of my old friends , so is ali .

.‫ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ‬، ‫ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬-8 We will have a test next week , so will they.

.‫ ﺍﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ‬، ‫ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﻧﻢ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮ ﺭﻭ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﻢ‬-9 I can’t understand your words well , neither can he.

72

‫‪Æ‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫‪CAN‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻦ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪ can‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗـﺪﺭﺕ ﻭ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ » ‪ « will be able to‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫) ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ( ‪ can Æ will be able to‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫) ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ – ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ( ‪ can Æ can‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪You can come with me tomorrow, provided you ask your father’s permission.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﭘﺎﻳﻢ ﺑﺪ ﺟﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﻢ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺗﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻛﻨﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪My foot hurts painfully, I won’t be able to play on the team tomorrow.‬‬

‫‪MUST Æ‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻄـﺮﺡ ﮔـﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ‪ must‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﯼ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ‬ ‫‪ will have to‬ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻋﻠﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﯼ(‬

‫‪ must Æ Will have to‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫)ﺍﻣﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪﻩ(‬

‫‪73‬‬

‫‪ must Æ Must‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺗﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻲ ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ ) ﻭﺍﻻ ( ﺍﺧﺮﺍﺟﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪You must do what I say, or else I will fire you.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻜﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺷﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪If you want to pass in the university enterance examination , you will have to study‬‬ ‫‪hard.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫‪Æ‬‬

‫‪WANT‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ will want‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻗﺼﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺼـﻤﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ to be going to‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩﻭ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ‪ +‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ‪want +‬‬

‫‪Æ‬‬

‫‪expect‬‬

‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪to be going to +‬‬

‫‪Æ‬‬

‫‪intend‬‬

‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ ‪will want +‬‬

‫‪Æ‬‬

‫‪need‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺶ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ‪ +‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ‪Want +‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﻮﻟﻢ ﺭﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻡ – ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺨﺮﻡ – ﺍﺯﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻡ ﭘﻮﻟﻢ ﺭﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺑﺪﻫﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪74‬‬

‫‪want‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

I will want my money next week - I’m going to buy a car- I want you to pay my money back.

75

‫‪Some &any‬‬ ‫‪ some -1‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ) ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ – ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺎﻳﻲ – ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺟﻤـﻊ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﻣﻔﻬـﻮﻡ ) ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭﻱ –‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻤﻲ – ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻨﻔـﻲ ﺑـﻪ ‪ any‬ﺗﺒـﺪﻳﻞ ﻣـﻲ ﮔـﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪I want to buy some books.‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﺨﺮﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪some people say that he is crazy.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺁﺏ ﺧﻨﻚ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﺯﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪There is some cold water in the jar.‬‬

‫ﭼﺮﺍ ﺗﻮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﻴﻮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻱ؟‬

‫?‪why didn’t you eat any fruit‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻓﻮﺯﻩ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I don’t want any of you to fail.‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ ‪ : 1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ‪ some‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫?‪You look thirsty , do you want some water‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ ‪ : 2‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺗﻌﺎﺭﻓﻲ ‪ some‬ﺑﻪ ‪ any‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫?‪would you like some more tea‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﭼﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ؟‬

‫ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ ‪ : 3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ‪ some‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪You should have a good command of english because some day , some student may‬‬ ‫‪ask you some question that you can’t answer.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﺴﻠﻂ ﺑﺎﺷﻲ – ﭼﻮﻥ ﻳﻜﺮﻭﺯﻱ ) ﻧﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ( – ﻳﻚ ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﻱ ) ﻧﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ( ﻣﻤﻜـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻳـﻚ‬ ‫ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮ ﺑﭙﺮﺳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺑﺪﻫﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ ‪ any : 4‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪76‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﭼﻲ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ؟ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪What would you like for lunch? Any thing you like.‬‬

‫‪77‬‬

‫» ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ «‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ – ﻳﻚ ﻛﺴﻲ‬

‫‪some body Æ‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ – ﻳﻚ ﻛﺴﻲ‬

‫‪Æ‬‬

‫‪some one‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰ‬

‫‪Æ‬‬

‫‪some thing‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ – ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ‬

‫‪some where Æ‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ – ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ‬

‫‪some place Æ‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ some‬ﺍﺯ ‪ every‬ﻳﺎ ‪ any‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ – ﻫﻤﻪ ﻛﺲ‬

‫‪Æ‬‬

‫‪every body‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﻪ – ﻫﻤﻪ ﻛﺲ‬

‫‪Æ‬‬

‫‪every one‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ‬

‫‪Æ‬‬

‫‪every thing‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺟﺎ‬

‫‪every where Æ‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺟﺎ‬

‫‪Æ‬‬

‫‪every place‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ no‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ some‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﺲ‬

‫‪Æ‬‬

‫‪no body‬‬

‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﺲ‬

‫‪Æ‬‬

‫‪no one‬‬

‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﭼﻴﺰ‬

‫‪Æ‬‬

‫‪no thing‬‬

‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ‬

‫‪Æ‬‬

‫‪no where‬‬

‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ‬

‫‪Æ‬‬

‫‪no place‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪some body / every body / nobody / any body → works‬‬

‫‪78‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪ ’s‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ else‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ’s‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Some body‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪+ ’s +‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪+ else’s +‬‬

‫‪every body‬‬ ‫‪no body‬‬ ‫‪any body‬‬

‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ‪ some‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ‪ no‬ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨـﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ ‪ no‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ ‪ any‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Somebody knows him.‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ‬

‫‪Nobody knows him.‬‬

‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﺲ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪He knows somebody.‬‬

‫ﺍﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ‬

‫‪He knows nobody.‬‬

‫ﺍﻭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ‬

‫‪He doesn’t know anybody.‬‬

‫‪-1‬‬

‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪-2‬‬

‫ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﻛﺴﻲ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﮕﻔﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪-3‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪-4‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻔﺖ‪.‬‬

‫?‪Is anybody going to say anything‬‬

‫‪Nobody told me anything yesterday.‬‬

‫‪I want every body to understand this matter.‬‬

‫‪Some body’s brother said some thing else.‬‬

‫‪79‬‬

Some body else’s brother said some thing else. .‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬

-5

We are going to visit some where else. :‫ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬some ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ‬

some body/some one

‫ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺴﻲ‬Æ some people

‫ﻳﻚ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ‬

some thing

‫ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ‬Æ some things

‫ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ‬

some where/some place

‫ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ‬Æ some places

‫ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ‬

:‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬.‫ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬other ‫ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻪ‬: Else

some body else

‫ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬Æ some other people ‫ﻛﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‬

some one else

‫ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬Æ some other people ‫ﻛﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‬

some thing else

‫ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬Æ some other things ‫ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‬

some where else

‫ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ‬Æ some other places ‫ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‬

some place else

‫ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ‬Æ some other places ‫ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‬

.‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬what ‫ ﺍﺯ‬some ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ‬ what other people?

‫ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ؟‬

80

what other things?

‫ﭼﻪ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ؟‬

what other places?

‫ﭼﻪ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ؟‬

:‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ some body else / some one else

Æ who else?

‫ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﻛﻲ‬

some thing else

Æ what else?

‫ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﭼﻲ‬

Æ where else?

some where else/ some place else

‫ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﻛﺠﺎ‬

:‫ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬.‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬who else’s ‫ ﺍﺯ‬whose else ‫ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ‬who else ‫ ﺍﺯ‬whom else ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ‬: ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬

‫ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺎﻡ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻛﻨﻲ؟‬

-1

What other people are you going to invite for dinner?

‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬

-2

‫ﭼﻪ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﺪ؟‬

-3

‫ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﻛﻲ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ؟‬

-4

‫ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺭﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻭﻧﻪ؟‬

-5

Who else’s car is outside?

What other things does he know?

Who else liked to come here with you?

Who else’s brother knows this matter?

81

‫» ﺩﻭ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻲ ﻫﺎ «‬

‫ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ this‬ﻭ ‪ that‬ﻭ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪ these‬ﻭ ‪ those‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪/ ’s‬ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ‪ + of +‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪this,that,these,those +‬‬ ‫‪This book of Ali’s.‬‬ ‫‪This book of mine.‬‬ ‫‪-1‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭ ﺗﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪-2‬‬

‫ﻣﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺍﻭﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻢ؟‬

‫‪I already know this brother of yours.‬‬

‫?‪May I borrow those two english books of yours‬‬

‫‪-3‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺴﺮ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺁﻗﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺫﻳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪This son of Ali’s always bothers us.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪These students of ours like to write more persian sentences.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪One student of mine wants to know the fact.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﺎ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺎ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪This teacher of ours sometimes doesn’t listen to our words.‬‬

‫‪ -7‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻜﻼﺳﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺟﻤﻌﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪82‬‬

Some of your classmates decide to come here next Friday. .‫ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭﻥ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺑﺸﻪ‬-8 This elder brother of yours can make friends with that good student or friend of mine.

83

‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ‬

‫ﻣﻠﻜﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪possesive forms‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪ of -3‬ﻭ ‪′s‬‬ ‫‪ : own -4‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ـ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪His father owns a factory.‬‬

‫ﭘﺪﺭﺵ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ -‬ﻛﺎﺭﺧﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪I used to own a bicycle.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﭼﺮﺧﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ ‪:‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ own‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﻣﻪ ‪that is my own car.‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻴﻪ؟‬

‫?‪whose car is it‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ‪ : belong to :‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪This fountain pen belongs to me.‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫?‪Whom does this fountain pen belong to‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫‪84‬‬

‫ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Putting two sentences together‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ‪ keep‬ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ )ﻛﻪ( ﺑـﻪ )ﻛـﻪ ﺁﻳـﺎ(‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ if‬ﻳﺎ ‪ whether‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫» ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪« .‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧـﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ )‪ ( or not‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ whether‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ )‪ ( or not‬ﻣـﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ whether‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I want to know if you will come here tomorrow on Friday.‬‬ ‫‪I want to know whether you will come here tomorrow on Friday.‬‬ ‫‪I want to know whether or not you will come here tomorrow on Friday.‬‬ ‫‪I want to know whether you will come here tomorrow on Friday or not.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺟﻤﻌﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ؟ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺟﻤﻌﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ؟‬

‫‪85‬‬

‫» ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ «‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ ( ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﭙﺮﺳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ) ﮔﻔﺘﻲ‪ -‬ﮔﻔﺘﻴﺪ – ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩﻳﺪ‪ -‬ﺑﺒﺨﺸﻴﺪ ( ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ‪did‬‬ ‫‪ you say‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ‪ did you say‬ﺗـﺄﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﺑـﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫?‪Where are you going‬‬

‫ﻛﺠﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ؟‬

‫?‪Where did you say, you are going‬‬

‫ﮔﻔﺘﻲ ﻛﺠﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ؟‬

‫? ‪How much money do you have on you‬‬

‫ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﭘﻮﻝ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻫﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ؟‬ ‫ﮔﻔﺘﻲ ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﭘﻮﻝ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻫﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ؟‬

‫?‪How much money did you say you have on you‬‬

‫ﺏ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﭙﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ‪ ،‬ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ » ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻲ « ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ » ‪ « do you think‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫? ‪Who is he‬‬

‫ﺍﻭ ﻛﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫?‪Who do you think he is‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻲ ﺍﻭ ﻛﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫? ‪How old are you‬‬

‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻟﺘﻪ ؟‬ ‫ﺍﮔﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻟﻤﻪ ؟‬

‫‪86‬‬

‫?‪How old do you think I am‬‬

‫» ‪« self‬‬

‫ﺑﺤﺚ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﻡ ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺵ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ » ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﻲ « ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪Reflexive pronouns‬‬

‫ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﻲ‬

‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‬

‫ﺟﻤﻊ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫‪ourselves‬‬

‫ﺧﻮﺩﻡ‬

‫‪myself‬‬

‫ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ‬

‫‪yourselves‬‬

‫ﺧﻮﺩﺕ‬

‫‪yourself‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺍ ﺧﻮﺩﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻱ؟‬ ‫?‪Why didn’t you introduce yourself‬‬

‫ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I think she is crazy, she is talking to herself.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ self‬ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪87‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮ ﺧﻮﺩﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻬﻢ ﺯﺩﻱ ؟‬ ‫‪You told it to me, yourself.‬‬ ‫‪You, yourself told it to me.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪They invited us themselves.‬‬ ‫‪They themselves invited us.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ‪ self‬ﻫﺎ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪ by‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ » ‪ « all by‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﭘﺴﺮﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﻘﺪﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪My son is old enough to go to school by himself.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﺗﻚ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﮔﺮﻳﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪He is sitting at the door all by himself and crying.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ‪ self‬ﻫﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ) ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷـﺪ(‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ‪ to‬ﻭ ‪ for‬ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I take the books with me/ myself‬‬ ‫‪she has some money on her/ herself‬‬ ‫‪close the window behind you/ yourself‬‬ ‫‪she made address for herself‬‬ ‫‪I read the text to myself‬‬

‫‪88‬‬

‫‪Here & There‬‬ ‫‪ here‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻭ ‪ there‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Here‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ +‬ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ‪+‬‬ ‫‪There‬‬

‫‪Here‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ +‬ﻓﻌﻞ ‪+‬‬ ‫‪There‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫) ﺑﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻢ – ﺍﻳﻨﺎﻫﺎﺷﻢ (‬ ‫) ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎ – ﺩﻳﺪﻱ (‬

‫‪Here I am.‬‬ ‫‪Here you are.‬‬ ‫‪Here it is .‬‬

‫) ﺍﻳﻨﺎﻫﺎﺵ (‬

‫‪There they are.‬‬

‫) ﺍﻭﻧﺎﻫﺎﺷﻦ (‬

‫‪There are the children‬‬

‫) ﺍﻭﻧﺎﻫﺎﺷﻦ ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎ (‬

‫‪Here comes the bus.‬‬

‫) ﺍﻳﻨﺎﻫﺎﺵ ﺍﺗﻮﺑﻮﺱ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﻴﺎﺩ (‬

‫‪There goes your fathre.‬‬

‫) ﺍﻭﻧﺎﻫﺎﺵ ﭘﺪﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﻴﺎﺩ(‬

‫‪89‬‬

‫» ﭼﻨﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺗﻌﺎﺭﻓﻲ «‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ‬

‫‪Help your self:‬‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ )ﺩﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ(‬

‫‪you first:‬‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ )ﺩﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ(‬

‫‪after you:‬‬

‫ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻧﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻭﻝ – ﺧﺎﻧﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺘﺮﻧﺪ‬

‫‪ladies first:‬‬

‫ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﻨﺸﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫‪please be seated:‬‬

‫ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬

‫‪go on:/ go ahead‬‬

‫ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‬

‫‪who is speaking:‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﻣﻔـﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ‪ there is‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﺟﻤـﻊ ﺍﺯ ‪there are‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺟﻴﺒﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺎ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺩﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪There is a pen in my pocket , come and take it.‬‬

‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﻭﻣﺪﻡ ﺗﻮ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻴﺰﻡ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪When I came in, there were two pens on my desk.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﻛﻤﻲ ﺁﺏ ﻳﺦ ﺗﻮﻱ ﻳﺨﭽﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪There is some cold water in the refrigerator.‬‬

‫‪90‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻧﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﺮﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﻨﻲ؟‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﺑﭙﺮﺱ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺖ ﻗﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ؟‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻭ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ ؟‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻭ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1- I want to know whether you are going to buy or rent the house.‬‬ ‫‪2- Ask him if he can lend you some money.‬‬ ‫‪3- I’m not sure whether he will come to the meetting with me or not.‬‬ ‫‪4- He lives in this small home by him self.‬‬ ‫‪5- I wish I could see my self as others see me.‬‬

‫‪91‬‬

‫» ‪« it‬‬

‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬

‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ‪ it‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﺋﺐ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣـﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻛـﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻫﻮﺍ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪It is hot today.‬‬ ‫‪It is cold today.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪It was raining.‬‬

‫ﻫﻮﺍ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪It is sunny.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Hurry up ! it is getting late .‬‬

‫ﻋﺠﻠﻪ ﻛﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ? ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ‪2‬‬

‫‪What time is it ? it is five to two.‬‬

‫‪.‬‬

‫‪What time is it ? it is five to two.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺖ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪it is far.‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫?‪How far is it from here‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ؟‬

‫‪it is about 5 miles.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 5‬ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪92‬‬

:‫ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬: ‫ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﻳﺖ‬-4 .‫ﻛﻲ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ؟ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ Who is it at the door? It must be Ali. : ‫ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬-5

it + is / was / will be + ‫ ﺻﻔﺖ‬+ ( for + ‫ ) ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ‬+‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬

.‫ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ It is easy. It is easy to speak English. It is easy for you to speak English. :‫ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬it -6 That is it

It is a pity :

‫ﺧﻮﺩﺷﻪ‬

‫ﺍﻓﺴﻮﺱ ﺣﻴﻒ ﺷﺪ‬

It pays well/ it is worth it: ‫ﻣﻲ ﺍﺭﺯﺩ – ﺍﺭﺯﺷﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬

Be it so : ‫ﺁﻣﻴﻦ – ﺍﻳﻨﻄﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻪ‬

take it easy:

it is time:

‫ﺑﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﻝ – ﺳﺨﺖ ﻧﮕﻴﺮ‬

it makes no difference : it is no Use/ Good

‫ﻭﻗﺘﺸﻪ‬

‫ﻓﺮﻕ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻪ‬ + ‫ ﻓﻌﻞ‬+ ing

‫ ﻓﺎﻳﺪﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬،‫ﺑﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

It isn’t up to you

‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﭼﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ‬

It is none of your business

‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﭼﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ‬

93

‫ﺻﺮﻑ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺭ ‪ 16‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫‪1 I take.‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫‪2. I am taking.‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫‪3. I have taken.‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻲ ) ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ (‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ) ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ (‬

‫‪4. I have been taking .‬‬

‫‪1. I will take.‬‬

‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫‪2. I will be taking.‬‬

‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫‪3. I will have taken.‬‬

‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫‪4. I will have been taking.‬‬

‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫‪1. I would take.‬‬

‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ‬

‫‪2. I would be taking.‬‬

‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫‪3. I would have been taking.‬‬

‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫‪4. I would have taken.‬‬

‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ‪،‬ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫‪1. I took.‬‬

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫‪2. I was taking.‬‬

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫‪3. I had taken.‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ‪ -‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫‪4. I had been taking.‬‬

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫‪94‬‬

‫» ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ «‬ ‫‪ = along -1‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ = across‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻄﺮﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﻱ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺳﻮ ﺭﻓﺘﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I went across the street.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪﻡ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺯﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I saw him walking along the street yesterday.‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻧﺪﻭﻳﭻ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻲ ﺁﻧﻄﺮﻑ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪There is a sandwich shop across the street.‬‬

‫‪ : against -2‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺿﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪They voted against us.‬‬

‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺃﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪It is against regulations.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺕ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ‪ by‬ﺑﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻـﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ‪ in‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺗﻮﺑﻮﺱ ‪ on‬ﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺩﻭ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ‪ on‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪By bus , By taxi , By car , By subway , By plane‬‬ ‫) ‪By land , By sea , By air , By train ( rail road‬‬ ‫‪in/on a bus‬‬ ‫‪in the car , in my car‬‬ ‫‪on a bicycle , on a horse‬‬

‫‪95‬‬

‫‪ inside : outside # inside -4‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻀـﺎﺩ ﺁﻥ ‪ out side‬ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﻼﺱ ﮔﺮﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪It is hotter inside the class than outside.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪The door is locked from inside.‬‬

‫‪in # out , into # out of -5‬‬ ‫‪ in‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ) ﺩﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻱ ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻫـﻢ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺍﺳـﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ into‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﻀﺎﺩ ‪ out # in‬ﻭ ﻣﺘﻀﺎﺩ ‪out of # into‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪the student are in class.‬‬

‫ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﻱ ﻛﻼﺳﻨﺪ‬

‫‪come in.‬‬

‫ﺑﻴﺎ ﺗﻮ‬

‫‪go out.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﻭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎ ﺗﻮﻱ ﻛﻼﺱ‬

‫‪come into the class.‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺑﺮﻭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ‬

‫‪go out of the class.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﻟﺒﺎﺱ ﭘﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮ ﻭ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻏﺮﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪He jumped into the pool with his clothes on and pulled the drowning boy out of the‬‬ ‫‪pool.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﺭ ‪ in‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪96‬‬

in the room , in the office

‫ﺳﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ‬

in the yard , in the gardan

‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﺭ‬

in the river , in the sea

‫ﻣﺎﻳﻊ‬

.‫ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ‬in ‫ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬there , here ‫ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬:‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬ Come in here. Don’t smoke in there .

to eat in. to eat out. to be in. to be out.

‫ﺑﻴﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻧﺠﺎ ﺳﻴﮕﺎﺭ ﻧﻜﺶ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻏﺬﺍ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻏﺬﺍ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬

to let in.

‫ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬

to let out.

‫ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬

to breathe in. to breathe out.

‫ﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﺩﻡ‬

97

‫‪ : at -6‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ) ﻛﻨﺎﺭ – ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ – ﺩﻡ ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ‪ table , desk‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﻡ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪He is sitting at the window and watching out.‬‬

‫ﺑﺸﻴﻦ ﭘﺸﺖ ﻣﻴﺰﺕ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﺪﻩ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Sit at your desk and teach.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪ in :‬ﺑﺰﺭﮒ – ‪ at‬ﻛﻮﭼﻚ‬ ‫‪The plane will land in Tehran at Mehrabad airport.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ at :‬ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ‪ in -‬ﻛﻮﭼﻚ‬ ‫‪He works at the oil company in accounting department.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ » ‪ « office‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺟﻮﻧﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﺵ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Mr Jones is somewhere at the office but not in his office.‬‬ ‫‪ : on -7‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻨﺸﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺸﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Don’t sit on the floor ! sit on the chair.‬‬

‫‪: over & above -8‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺗﻔـﺎﻭﺕ ﻛـﻪ ‪over‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ‪ above‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻣﺘﻀﺎﺩ ‪ under # over‬ﻭ ‪ below # above‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪98‬‬

‫ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺠﺎ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺧﻂ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺧﻂ؟‬: 1‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ Where should I write my name? over the line or under it . .‫ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺎ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺳﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ‬: 2‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ There are four lights above our heads. ‫ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﺖ ﭼﻴﻪ ؟‬: 3‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ What is it under your foot

99

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ) ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻲ ( ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺛﺮ ﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ : A‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ » ﺍﺳﺖ « ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳـﻲ ﻣـﻲﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ For ،‬ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻤـﻪ ﻧﻤـﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ +‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫‪Õ‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪I have known him for two years.‬‬

‫ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪He has had this car for five years.‬‬

‫‪ : B‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ » ﺍﺯ « ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ »ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ « ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﺸـﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤـﻪ ) ﺍﺯ ( ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ‪ since‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤـﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ‪ +‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ‪ +‬ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ‪ +‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪ Õ‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 2‬ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪He has been here since two o’clock.‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪He hasn’t gone to school since last week.‬‬

‫‪:‬‬

‫‪ C‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ) ﺍﻡ ـ ﺍﻱ ـ ﺍﺳﺖ ـ ﺍﻳﻢ ـ ﺍﻳﺪ ـﺎﻧﺪ ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪I haven’t notified them.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻡ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪:for -1‬‬

‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪for +‬‬ ‫‪for two weeks.‬‬

‫ﺩﻭ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪for the last/ past +‬‬ ‫‪for the last two weeks.‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ‬

‫‪: since .2‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ‪since +‬‬ ‫‪since yesterday‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ‬

‫‪101‬‬

since + last + ‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ since last week

‫ﺍﺯ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ‬

‫ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ‬: since / since then/ever since -3 .‫ﺩﻭ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻡ‬ He left for England two weeks ago and I haven’t heard from him since/ since then/ ever since.

.4

‫ ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻲ‬+ since + ‫ ( ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬I ) it is + ‫ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬+ since + ‫ ( ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬II )

.‫( ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬II) ‫ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ‬since ‫( ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬I) ‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ‬

.‫ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺳﻪ ﻣﺎﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ‬: ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ It has been three months since we started this term. It is three months since we started this term.

102

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺶ ﻣﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺩﻭ ﺗﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺒﺢ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻫﻴﭻ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺳﻪ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪1- He has been very upset since his friend died.‬‬ ‫‪2- We have studied English for two terms but we can’t speak.‬‬ ‫‪3- He hasn’t eaten anything since morning.‬‬ ‫‪4- He has taught mathematics in this school for three years.‬‬ ‫‪5- He has been here for an hour and a half.‬‬ ‫‪ : recently- lately .5‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﺧﻴﺮﹰﺍ – ﺗﺎﺯﮔﻲ ﻫﺎ – ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ p.p‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭ ﺍﺧﻴﺮﹰﺍ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﻮ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪He has recently / lately bought a new car.‬‬

‫ﻼ‪ -‬ﺍﺑﺪﹰﺍ‪ -‬ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﻮﻥ‪ -‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ p.p‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧـﺪ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺗﻔـﺎﻭﺕ ﻛـﻪ‬ ‫‪ : ever-never .6‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ‪ -‬ﺍﺻ ﹰ‬ ‫‪ ever‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﻣﺎ ‪ never‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪103‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ؟ ﻧﻪ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫? ‪Have you ever been to England‬‬ ‫‪No, I haven’t ever been to England.‬‬ ‫‪No, I have never been to England.‬‬

‫‪ .7‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺎﺿـﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪So far‬‬ ‫‪by now‬‬ ‫‪up to now‬‬ ‫‪up till now‬‬ ‫‪up to the present time.‬‬

‫‪I have reviewed this lesson twice so far.‬‬

‫‪ : already .8‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ p.p‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻈـﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﺳـﺖ ﻣـﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﻣﺎ ﺩﻳﺮ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻳﻢ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪We are late , the bell has already gone/ rung.‬‬

‫‪ : just .9‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻥ – ﭼﻨﺪ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﻪ‪ -‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ p.p‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I have just finished my work.‬‬

‫‪104‬‬

‫‪ : yet .10‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ » ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ « ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺁﻧﻜـﻪ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﻛﻤﻜـﻲ ﻭ‬ ‫‪ not‬ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ not‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ ؟‬ ‫? ‪Have you notified them yet‬‬ ‫ﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪No, I haven’t notified them yet.‬‬ ‫‪No, I have not yet notified them.‬‬ ‫ﻼ‪ -‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻧﻪ – ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ : yet .11‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﻓﻌ ﹰ‬ ‫‪don’t do that yet.‬‬

‫ﻼ ﺍﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﻭ ﻧﻜﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌ ﹰ‬

‫‪don’t tell them anything yet.‬‬

‫ﻼ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﮕﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌ ﹰ‬

‫‪ : still .12‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ – ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻫﻢ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺯ‪ -‬ﻫﻢ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻌـﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪:‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ‪ still‬ﺑﻪ ‪ anymore/ any longer‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪I used to study English.‬‬ ‫‪Do you still study English.‬‬ ‫‪No , I don’t study English anymore/any longer.‬‬

‫‪105‬‬

‫» ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ « ) ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ (‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ :‬ﻫﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ : A‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ » ﺑﻮﺩ « ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳـﻲ ﻣـﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ» ﺑﻮﺩ « ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ for‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤـﻲ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪:A‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬

‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ » +‬ﺑﻮﺩ « ‪ +‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪ Å‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ‬

‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ + For +‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ : 1‬ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I had known him for two years.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ : 2 /‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻮﺩ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪He hadn’t eaten anything for three days when we took him to the doctor.‬‬

‫‪ : B‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ) ﺑﻮﺩﻡ – ﺑﻮﺩﻱ – ﺑﻮﺩ – ﺑﻮﺩﻳﻢ – ﺑﻮﺩﻳﺪ – ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ : 1/‬ﺍﻭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬ ‫‪He said ( that ) he had notified you before.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ : 2/‬ﻓﻜﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I thought ( that ) you had understood every thing.‬‬

‫‪106‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ‪:‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻛﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Subject + had + past participle‬‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪:‬‬

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪ + when/before +‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺁﻣﺪﻱ ﺗﻮ‪.‬‬

‫‪I had gone when/ before you came in‬‬

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ‪ + after +‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺁﻣﺪﻡ ﺗﻮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻱ ‪.‬‬

‫‪I come in after you had gone.‬‬

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ‪ + since +‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ ﺗﻮ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻱ‪You had gone since I had arrived. .‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻓﻮﺯﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I had taken no examination since I had failed.‬‬

‫‪107‬‬